Dodge 2008 LC22 Challenger SRT8 Specifications

62713 08 DodgeChallenger.qxd:62713cov
12/20/07
2:42 PM
Page 1
2008 Challenger SRT8
2008
OWNER’ S MANUAL
81-226-0821
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Challenger SRT8
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2007 Chrysler LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet
and various customer-oriented documents. You are
urged to read these publications carefully. Following the
instructions and recommendations in this manual will
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and is interested in your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed Index at the back of this manual contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual.
INTRODUCTION
5
1
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.
INTRODUCTION
7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
䡵 Security Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ FOB With Integrated Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
䡵 Illuminated Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Express Down Window Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .24
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Open The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
䡵 Trunk Lock And Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
䡵 Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .25
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
䡵 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .42
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped . . . . .44
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
11
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .67
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Lock Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
2
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Fob with Integrated Key and a Wireless
Ignition Node (WIN) with an integral ignition switch.
You can insert the double-sided integrated key into the
ignition switch with either side up.
Keyless Go Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Go feature,
refer to Section 5 of this manual for more information.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly to
an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three
of which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented positions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the detented ON position.
1
2
3
4
— LOCK
— ACCESSORY
— ON
— START
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
13
Fob With Integrated Key
The Fob with Integrated Key operates the ignition switch.
It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a valet key, which stores in the rear of the Fob.
2
The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the
battery in the vehicle or the Fob go dead. The valet key is
also for locking the glove box. You can keep the valet key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the valet key from the Fob, slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out of the Fob with your other
hand.
Valet Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided valet key into
the lock cylinders with either side up.
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Key Removal
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the key to the LOCK
position and then remove the key.
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power
sunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Delay Power Off to
Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the
ignition, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
key.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC
position.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses the factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only RKE transmitters that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
15
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
if an invalid RKE transmitter is used to operate the
ignition switch.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, the
Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on
after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem
with the electronics. This condition will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on
during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in
the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
• Exxon/Mobil Speedpass™, additional RKE transmitters, or any other transponder-equipped components
on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the
additional part is physically held against the transmitter being used to start the vehicle. Cell phones,
pagers, or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system.
All of the RKE transmitters provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only RKE transmitters that are programmed to
the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. Once a transmitter is programmed to a
vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE transmitters. Duplication of RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer
Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
programming a blank transmitter to the vehicle electronics. A blank transmitter is one that has never been
programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle RKE transmitters with
you to the authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid RKE transmitters with integrated
keys, you can program new transmitters to the system by
performing the following steps:
1. Insert the first valid integrated key into the ignition
switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position for
at least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the first key.
2. Insert the second valid integrated key and turn the
ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds.
17
After 10 seconds, a chime will sound and the Vehicle
Security Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash. Turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the
second key.
3. Insert a blank integrated key into the ignition switch
and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60
seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound and
the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop
flashing, turn on again for three seconds, and then turn
off.
The new integrated key is programmed. The RKE transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed RKE transmitter with integrated key, contact your authorized dealer for details.
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the system’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security Alarm System monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for
unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm,
the system will prevent the vehicle from starting and
provide the following audible and visible signals: the
horn will pulse; the headlights will flash; the park lights
will flash; and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light
in the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the system will turn the horn off after three
minutes, turn all of the visual signals off after 15 minutes,
and then the system will rearm itself.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System
Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press
a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger
door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After the last door is
closed, or if all doors are closed, the system will arm itself
in about 16 seconds. During that time, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will flash. If it does not
illuminate, the system is not arming. In addition, if you
open a door during the arming period, the system will
cancel the arming process. If you wish to rearm the
system after closing the door, you must repeat one of the
previously-described arming sequences.
19
To Disarm The System
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and
turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the TRUNK button
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
system.
• The system remains armed during trunk entry. Pressing the TRUNK button will not disarm the system. If
someone enters the vehicle through the trunk, and
opens any door, the alarm will sound.
• When the system is armed, the interior power door
lock switches will not unlock the doors.
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Vehicle Security Alarm System is designed to protect
your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously-described arming sequences has occurred, the
system will arm regardless of whether you are in the
vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
system.
If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes
disconnected, the system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, the
horn will sound, and the ignition will not start the
vehicle. If this occurs, disarm the system.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the system in your absence,
the horn will sound three times when you disarm the
system. Check the vehicle for tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
The courtesy lights will turn on when you press the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or open any door.
The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they
will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is
turned ON from the LOCK position.
NOTE:
• None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer
control is in the “defeat” position (extreme downward
position), unless the overhead map/reading lights are
turned on manually.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
21
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) allows you to lock or
unlock the doors, open the trunk, or activate the Panic
Alarm from distances up to about 35 ft (11 m) using a
hand-held radio transmitter. The transmitter need not be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
2
NOTE: Inserting the Fob with Integrated Key into the
ignition switch disables all buttons on that transmitter;
however, the buttons on the remaining transmitters will
continue to work. Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and
above disables all transmitter buttons for all fobs.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five
seconds, to unlock both doors. The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will also turn on.
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or both doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the transmitter. Refer to “Remote
Key Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with
the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key
removed.
• When not using the EVIC, perform the following
steps:
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer to
“Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock,” under ⬙Personal
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
• When not using the EVIC, perform the following
steps:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while
still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with
the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
23
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter. The
time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Turn
Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4.
To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. Refer to “Sound Horn with
Remote Key Lock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
• When not using the EVIC, perform the following
steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter
for at least four seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds.
Then, press the PANIC button while still holding the
LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Express Down Window Feature
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter and then
immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until
the windows lower to the level desired or until they
lower completely.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Open The Trunk
Press the TRUNK button on the transmitter two times
within five seconds to open the trunk.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24
km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
25
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key威, “Customer Key Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed transmitter, contact
your authorized dealer for details.
Transmitter Battery Service
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of
the fob. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver into the slot
and gently pry open the access door.
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. Reposition the access door panel over the battery
opening and snap into place.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
1 — Battery Access Door
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
• Doors closed
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a
targeted range of 328 ft (100 m).
• Trunk closed
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
27
• Hood closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level, and
• RKE PANIC button not pressed.
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will honk twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the
Vehicle
Allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch
to the ON position.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if so equipped) are disabled when the vehicle
is in the Remote Start mode.
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position in
order to drive the vehicle.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/
Turn To Run” will flash in the EVIC until you insert
the key. Once inserted, the message “Turn To Run”
will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
29
To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start
Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time.
2
NOTE: To avoid inadvertent shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward.
Door Lock Plunger
If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switch
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and any door is open, the power locks will
not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the key in the vehicle. Removing the key or closing the
door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, the
key is in the ignition, and the ignition is in the LOCK or
ACC position, a chime will sound as a reminder to
remove the key.
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically if all of the following
conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled
31
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by
your authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer for
programming.
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
The doors will unlock automatically if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled
2. The transmission is in gear
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h)
3. All doors are closed
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK
4. The throttle is pressed
4. The driver door is opened
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h), and
5. The doors were not previously unlocked, and
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
2
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled. Refer to “Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
• When not using the EVIC, perform the following
steps:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
2. Place the key in the ignition switch.
3. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending
up in the LOCK position. However, do not start the
engine.
4. Within 30 seconds, depress the power door UNLOCK
switch to unlock the doors.
5. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
NOTE: If you do not hear the chime, it means that the
system did not enter the programming mode and you
will need to repeat the procedure.
6. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control both of
the door windows.
33
There is a single window control on the passenger’s door
trim panel that operates the window on the passenger’s
door. The window controls will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.
NOTE: The door window will lower slightly if it is
closed completely when opening the door. The window
will return to its fully closed position after closing the
door. This action allows the door to open without resistance and prevents window and top seal damage.
NOTE: You can remotely lower both the driver side and
passenger side windows at the same time. Refer to
“Remote Keyless Entry/Express Down Window Feature”
in this section.
Power Window Switches
2
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver’s door power window switch and passenger door
power window switch on some models have an AUTOdown feature. Press the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
The power window switches will remain active for up to
60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for
this feature is programmable. Refer to “Delay Power Off
to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
one window open, then open the other window to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the Trunk Release button. The button is located
on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
switch will operate.
35
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
pressing the Trunk Release button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or the key
removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Trunk Release Button
2
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
Trunk Emergency Release
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Emergency Release
The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency
release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid,
near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened
trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
37
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, the
front airbags for both the driver and front passenger, and
the supplemental side curtain airbags for the driver and
passengers seated next to a window. If you will be
carrying children too small for adult-size belts, your seat
belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint
systems.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
WARNING!
2
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
•
•
•
•
•
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat
belt properly.
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are
designed to go around the large bones of your body. These are
the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a
collision best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries
in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries,
or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt.
People belted together can crash into one another in an accident,
hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap
belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
39
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
Latch Plate
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect
you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your
body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your
belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a
sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the
possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous. Your
Latch Plate To Buckle
body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a
collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under
the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs are not as strong as
shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your
strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your
head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The
lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt cannot do its job as well. In a collision,
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer and have it fixed.
41
Removing Slack From Belt
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight around
the occupant in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). (Refer to information on Airbags in this section). Like the front airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision that is severe
enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both
must be replaced.
43
Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert威) will alert the driver to buckle the seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
BeltAlert威 will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt
Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver’s seat
belt is buckled. The BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds
and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlert威 Programming
The BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer or by performing the following steps:
NOTE: Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating
the BeltAlert威.
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat
belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to
turn off and then proceed to the next step.
The BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: You must perform the following steps within 60
seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seat belt at least three times, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while
re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract
the seat belt.
NOTE: When the BeltAlert威 is deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled.
Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. However, the belt will still retract to remove slack
in the shoulder belt. Use The Automatic Locking mode
any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and younger should be properly restrained in
the rear seat whenever possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How to Engage the Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
here a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
45
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
2
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating position. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver side front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger side front
airbag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the
1 — Airbags
2 — Knee Bolsters
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that
are based on collision severity.
47
This vehicle is also equipped with supplemental side
curtain airbags (located above the side windows) to
protect the driver and passenger sitting next to a window.
Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to open them. You may damage
the airbags and you could be injured because the
airbags are no longer functional. These protective
covers for the airbag cushions are designed to
open only when the airbags are inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios
etc.
Side Window Airbag
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the side curtain
airbag. The area where the side curtain airbag is
located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the curtain airbags.
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the
instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side curtain
airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
While the seat belts are designed to protect you in many
types of collisions, the front airbags will deploy in
moderate to severe frontal collisions. The supplemental
side curtain airbag on the crash side of the vehicle will
also trigger in moderate to severe side collisions. However, even in collisions where the airbags deploy, you
need the seat belts to keep you in the correct position for
the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and younger should ride buckled up in the rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
front airbag. An airbag deployment could cause
severe injury or death to infants in that position.
2. Children who are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly should be secured in the rear seat in
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. (Refer to
information on Child Restraint in this section.)
3. Older children who do not use child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
4. If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
49
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint. (Refer to information on Child Restraint in this
section.)
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door, as the airbags will inflate
forcefully into the space between you and the door.
9. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the ⬙If
You Need Customer Assistance⬙ section.
2
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Driver Airbag
• This vehicle has supplemental side curtain airbags, and they need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors
• Side Door Pressure Sensors
• Airbag Warning Light
• Front Passenger Airbag
• Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows
• Instrument Panel
• Interconnecting Wiring
• Seat Belt Reminder Light
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Front Acceleration Sensors
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
How the Airbag System Works
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC will not
detect rollover.
• The ORC also determines if a side impact is severe
enough to deploy the supplemental side curtain airbag
as required for each type of impact.
51
• The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON position. These include all of the
items listed above except the knee bolster, the instrument panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the
key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or
not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and they will
not inflate.
• The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for six to eight
seconds as a self-check when the ignition is
first turned on. After the self-check, the
Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects
a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the
Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on
again after initial start-up.
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
• The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag/Inflator
Units are located in the center of the steering wheel
and the passenger side of the instrument panel. When
the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of nontoxic
gas is generated to inflate the front airbags. Different
airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover, and
the upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to
their full size. The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The
driver front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in
the sides of the airbag. The passenger front airbag gas
is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag.
In this way, the airbags do not interfere with your
control of the vehicle.
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The Supplemental Side Impact SRS Side Curtain
Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side
collisions. When the ORC detects a collision requiring
the side curtain airbag to inflate, it signals the inflators
on the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic
gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag. The
inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of
the headliner out of the way and covers the window.
The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about
one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes)
with enough force to injure you if you are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially applies to children. The side curtain airbag is
only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
If a Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORC
detects a moderate-to-severe collision to help restrain the
driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate.
53
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.
If you do have a collision that deploys the airbags, any or
all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in
another collision, the airbags will not be in place to
protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags cannot protect you in another collision. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment,
with the vehicle stopped, and the vehicle communication
network intact, and the power intact, the Enhanced
Accident Response System performs the following functions:
• Cuts off fuel to the engine.
• Flashes hazard lights.
• Turns on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
• Unlocks the doors automatically.
NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the
key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is
driven.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured
because the airbags are not there to protect you. Do
not modify the components or wiring, including
adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering
wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of
the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
55
NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers
during the six to eight seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned ON.
• The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight
second interval.
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see the following list) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near
deployment, and up to a quarter second of high-speed
deceleration data during and/or after airbag deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor
detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a
crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the
possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order
to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition
to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC, such
investigations may be requested by customers, insurance
carriers, government officials, and professional crash
researchers, such as those associated with universities,
and with hospital and insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its
designated representative will first obtain permission of
the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually
the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a
court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant).
A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity
upon request. General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a
particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by
Chrysler LLC to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data with
a particular crash record in an aggregate database, provided
confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved,
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC
product,
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant, or
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
• Airbag disable light status (if equipped)
57
• ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
• Impact acceleration and angle
• Seat belt status
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
• Transmission gear selection
• Cruise control status
• Traction/stability control status
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System status (if equipped)
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others could
be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
Infants and Child Restraints
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing, infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
59
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to
“LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)” in this section.
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child
Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren)” in this section.
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
2
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.
to
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
61
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
2
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats. You should NEVER install LATCHcompatible child seats so that two seats share a common
lower anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent
rear-seating positions, or if your child restraints are not
LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
LATCH Anchorages
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions
carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
are provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback and are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are
under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
63
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
seatcover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage
cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the
child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the
most direct path between the anchor and the child
restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat,
removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder
belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt system will
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull
it tight if necessary.
The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking mode in
order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed.
Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode” in this section. A
locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic
locking feature is enabled. Position the shoulder and lap
belt on the child restraint. The automatic locking retractor
is activated by first attaching the child seat, then pulling
all of the webbing out of the retractor, then allowing the
webbing to retract back into the retractor. Tighten webbing. To release, simply unbuckle the seat belt by depressing the button, allowing the webbing to retract into
the retractor.
65
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
2
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to
the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Tether Strap Mounting
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, and rear axle) in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
67
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
installed at the factory is high-quality and energyconserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. The recommended
viscosity and quality grades is shown in Section 7.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered as a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
2
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
Lock Your Vehicle
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended, even in your
own driveway or garage. Try to park your vehicle in a
well-lit area and never invite theft by leaving articles of
value exposed.
Exhaust Gas
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
(CO) follow these safety tips.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk open, make
sure that all windows are closed and the climate control
blower switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the
recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
69
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
2
70
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for six to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
3
䡵 Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
▫ UConnect威 System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Power Remote Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Heated Remote Control Mirrors —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect威 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . .77
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
72
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Voice Recognition System — If Equipped . . . . . . 104
䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation . . . . 104
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . 117
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Headlights On With Wipers
(Available With Auto Headlights Only) . . . . . . 117
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Easy Entry Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Front Seat Back Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 113
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . . 118
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Multifunction Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights . . . . . 120
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
73
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Headlights On With Wipers
(Available With Auto Headlights Only) . . . . . . 124
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . 125
䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Electronic Speed Control Operation . . . . . . . . 126
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . . 134
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3
74
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Opening Sunroof - Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . 141
▫ Opening Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Closing Sunroof - Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Closing Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
䡵 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Sliding Center Console Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Venting Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
75
CAUTION!
Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror.
A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated.
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger-side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
76
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger-side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger-side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger-side convex mirror.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions, full
forward, full rearward, and normal.
Power Remote Control Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror, or off position.
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
77
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
Power Mirror Control
Heated Remote Control Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature
is activated whenever you turn on the Electric Rear
Window Defroster.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
78
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect姞) —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: For UConnect威 customer support, visit the
following websites:
NOTE: The sales code RER, REN and REU radios contain
an integrated Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)
system. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
UConnect威 system operating instructions for these radios.
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
UConnect威 is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communications system. UConnect威 allows you to dial a phone
number with your cellular phone using simple voice
commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial” ѧ
“248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will
automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect威
system.
• or call 1–877–855–8400
NOTE: The UConnect威 system requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Version 0.96 or higher. See the UConnect威 website for
supported phones.
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
UConnect威 allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
The UConnect威 phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names, with four numbers per name. Each language has
a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Bluetooth威
“Hands-Free profile” cellular phone. UConnect威 features
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so UConnect威 works
no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be it your
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is
turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
UConnect威 system. The UConnect威 system allows up to
seven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Only
one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the
system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
Phone Button
The rearview mirror contains the microphone
for the system (depending on the type of
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
(PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button)
that will enable you to access the system.
79
Voice Recognition Button
Actual button location may vary with radio.
The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The UConnect威 system can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
UConnect威 website for supported phones. If your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any UConnect威
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnect威 system is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect威 system
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
3
80
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect威 system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect威
system and to navigate through the UConnect威 menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect威 system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
UConnect威 system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the beep. The UConnect威 system will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the UConnect威 system from idle, simply press
the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect威 system sessions begin with a
press of the PHONE button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect威 System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect威 system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
UConnect威 website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
81
The following are general phone to UConnect威 system
pairing instructions:
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect威 system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
3
82
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, with 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect威 system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect威 system. The priority allows the
UConnect威 system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect威
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
Connectivity⬙ in this section).
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
Dial by Saying a Number
Call by Saying a Name
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.⬙
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901.⬙ The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. Based on the country in which the vehicle was purchased, the UConnect威 system limits the
user from dialing an invalid combination of numbers.
For example, in the U.S., 234-567-890 is nine digits
long, which is not a valid U.S. phone number - the
closest valid phone number has 10 digits.
• The UConnect威 system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
83
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect威 phonebook.
To learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer
to ⬙Add Names to Your UConnect威 Phonebook,⬙ in
this section.
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or
⬙Robert⬙ instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
• The UConnect威 system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
3
84
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The UConnect威 system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
Phonebook Download
UConnect威 allows the user to download entries from
their phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the
PHONE button and say “Phonebook Download.” The
system prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
NOTE:
• The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
• Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
the UConnect威 system, and then send the address
book entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to
drop the Bluetooth威 connection.
• If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
Edit Entries in the UConnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
feature.
85
Delete Entries in the UConnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the “Voice Recognition” button
while the UConnect威 system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
3
86
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After you enter the name, the UConnect威 system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect威 Phonebook
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
• The UConnect威 system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect威 Phonebook
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
• The UConnect威 system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the “Voice
Recognition” button during the playing of the desired
name, and say ⬙Call.⬙
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙
operations at this point.
• The UConnect威 system will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect威 system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect威 system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect威 system will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject
the call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
87
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the PHONE button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The UConnect威 system compatible phones in
the market today do not support rejecting an incoming
call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user
can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the “Voice Recognition” button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to ⬙Toggling Between Calls⬙ in this section. To combine
two calls, refer to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this section.
3
88
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the “Voice Recognition” button while a call is in progress, and make a
second phone call, as described under ⬙Making a Second
Call While Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call
has established, press and hold the PHONE button until
you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Redial
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
89
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the UConnect威 system and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• The UConnect威 system will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the UConnect威 system for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the UConnect威 system to the mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
UConnect威 system.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
UConnect威 system after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
UConnect姞 System Features
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the UConnect威 system either until the call
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect威 system is
using:
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
3
90
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect威 system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect威 language change operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific
and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect威 system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S.
and Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service and
area.
The UConnect威 system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
phone directly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
UConnect威 system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations, when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect威 system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
City in Mexico).
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
91
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect威 system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your UConnect威 system to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the UConnect威
system.
3
92
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When calling a number with your UConnect威 system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can press
the “Voice Recognition” button and say the sequence you
wish to enter, followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example,
if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
4 6 #), you can press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number, or sequence of
numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is also to be used for
navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored UConnect威 phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number and say the name of the phonebook
entry you wish to send. The UConnect威 system will then
send the corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations; this is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ,⬙ you could press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect威 system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect威 system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect威 system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect威. The status is given for roaming, network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
93
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect威 system (while dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect威 system will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnect威 system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
3
94
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute Off)
When you mute the UConnect威 system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect威 system:
• Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the UConnect威 system:
• Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect威 system allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect威 system
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your UConnect威 paired cellular phone to the
UConnect威 system or vice versa, press the “Voice Recognition” button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect威 System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a UConnect威 paired cellular phone
and the UConnect威 system, follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
• The UConnect威 system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the “Voice Recognition” button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the
next two sections for an alternate way to “select” or
“delete” a paired phone.
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the UConnect威 system.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button at
any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone that you wish to select.
95
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
UConnect威 system will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft [9 m]) the vehicle.
Delete UConnect威 Paired Cellular Phones
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
• You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button at
any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone you wish to delete.
3
96
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect姞
System
UConnect威 Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
PHONE button and say “UConnect威 Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect威
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
From outside the UConnect威 mode (e.g., from radio
mode):
• Press and hold the “Voice Recognition” button for five
seconds until the session begins, or,
• Press the “Voice Recognition” button and say the
⬙Setup, Voice Training⬙ command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect威 system. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched OFF.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
97
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
• When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
• Performance is maximized under:
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect威 phonebook.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• The UConnect威 phonebook nametag recognition rate
is optimized for the person who stored the name in the
phonebook.
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
3
98
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect威 system.
• Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the UConnect威 system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by switching the
phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain
in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must
wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
99
3
100
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
101
3
102
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
pairing
phone book
103
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
UConnect威 Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
3
104
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions and all attention should be
kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may
result in an accident causing serious injury or death.
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation
This Voice Recognition System allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: In a stressful situation, take care to speak into
the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as
possible. The ability of the Voice Interface System to
When you press the VR hard-key, you will hear a beep.
The beep is your signal to give a command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the VR hard-key, listen for the beep, and
say your command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pressing the VR hard-key while the system is speaking is
known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted
and you can add or change commands. This will become
helpful once you start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words CANCEL,
HELP, or MAIN MENU.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed, and the heater/air-conditioning fan is
set to low.
105
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the VR hard-key
and say HELP or MAIN MENU.
Commands
The Voice Recognition System understands two types of
commands. Global commands are available at all times.
Local commands are available if the supported radio
mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key.
2. Say a command (e.g., HELP).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the voice recognition
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for VR
is different then the audio system.
3
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key. You may
say MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu.
• MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band say FM or RADIO FM. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
• RADIO (to switch to the radio mode)
• FREQUENCY (to change the frequency)
• DISC (to switch to the disc mode)
• NEXT STATION (to select the next station)
• MEMO (to switch to the memo recorder)
• PREVIOUS STATION (to select the previous station)
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave - if equipped)
To switch to the AM band say AM or RADIO AM. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
• RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
• FREQUENCY (to change the frequency)
• NEXT STATION (to select the next station)
• PREVIOUS STATION (to select the previous station)
• RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
• MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode say SAT or SATELLITE
RADIO. In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• CHANNEL NUMBER (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• NEXT CHANNEL (to select the next channel)
• PREVIOUS CHANNEL (to select the previous channel)
• LIST CHANNEL (to hear a list of available channels)
• SELECT NAME (to say the name of a channel)
• RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
• MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode say DISC. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
• TRACK (#) (to change the track)
• NEXT TRACK (to play the next track)
• PREVIOUS TRACK (to play the previous track)
• MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
107
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode say MEMO. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
• NEW MEMO (to record a new memo) — During the
recording you may press the VR hard-key to stop
recording. You continue by saying one of the following
commands:
− SAVE (to save the memo)
− CONTINUE (to continue recording)
− DELETE (to delete the recording)
• PLAY MEMOS (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the VR hardkey to stop playing memos. You continue by saying
one of the following commands:
− REPEAT (to repeat a memo)
− NEXT (to play the next memo)
3
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
− PREVIOUS (to play the previous memo)
− DELETE (to delete a memo)
• DELETE ALL (to delete all memos)
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VR
hard-key first and wait for the beep, before speaking the
“barge in” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect威
system Voice Training feature may be used.
1. Press the VR hard-key, speak “System Setup” and once
you are in that menu then speak “Voice Training.” This
will train your own voice to the system and will improve
recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect威 System. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched OFF. This procedure may be repeated with a
new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice
only.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Easy Entry Seats
Pushing the lever upward (toward the front of the
vehicle) allows the seat back to dump forward and the
seat to slide forward. This allows for easier access to the
rear seat.
Power Seats
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat
near the floor. Use this switch to move the driver’s seat
up or down, forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat.
3
Power Seat Switch
Easy Entry Seats
109
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Front Seat Back Recline
To recline:
1. Lean forward in the seat and lift the handle, then lean
back to the desired position and release the handle.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat as it may
cause damage to the seat controls.
Recline Lever
2. Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright
position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lumbar Support
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever forward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
111
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the
event of impact from the rear. Adjust the restraint so that the
upper edge is as high as practical. To raise it, pull upward
on the head restraint. To lower it, depress the button on the
post guide and push downward on the head restraint.
Lumbar Support
Adjustable Head Restraint
3
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats
Heated seats provide comfort and warmth on cold days
and can help soothe sore muscles and backs. The heaters
provide the same heat level for both cushion and back.
The driver seat and front passenger seat are heated.
The controls for each heater are located near the bottom
center of the instrument panel. After turning on the
ignition, you can choose from High, Low, or Off heat
settings. Amber indicators in the top portion of each
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicators
will illuminate for high, one for low, and none for off.
Heated Seat Switch
Press the switch once to select high level heating. Press
the switch a second time to select low level heating. Press
the switch a third time to shut OFF the heating elements.
If high level heating is selected, the system will automatically switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of indicators
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
illuminated changes from two to one, indicating the
change. Operation on the low setting also turns off
automatically after 30 minutes.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in the
illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. These
loops can be tucked away when not in use.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because
of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat.
113
Rear Folding Seat
3
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood. First, pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
Hood Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Next, move to the outside of the vehicle and push the
safety catch to the left. The safety catch is located under
the center front edge of the hood.
115
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6
in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure the hood latch is
fully latched before driving.
Hood Safety Catch
3
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
instrument panel light dimming, interior lights, and fog
lights.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Turn it to the second detent for headlight, park light, and
instrument panel light operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO (A) position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
ignition switch off. To turn the automatic system off,
move the headlight switch out of the AUTO (A) position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO (A)
117
position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when
the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this
feature.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to ”Headlights On with Wipers,” under
“Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),”
under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section
4.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, turn off the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned OFF.
3
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you turn the headlights, park lights, or ignition switch
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
The Headlight delay time is programmable. Refer to
“Delay Turning Headlights Off,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is ON, the
headlights are off, and the parking brake is off. The
headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights
and press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog
lights, either press the headlight switch again or turn off
the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Control Lever
The multifunction control lever controls the operation of
the turn signals, headlight beam selection, and passing
lights. The lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
119
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction control lever up or down and the
corresponding turn signal indicator in the instrument
cluster flashes to show proper operation of the front and
rear turn signal lights. You can also signal a lane change
by moving the lever partially up or down without
moving beyond the detent. Releasing the lever at the
detent will provide three flashes.
If either indicator has a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light
when the lever is moved, see your authorized dealer for
service.
NOTE: A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mi (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Multifunction Control Lever
3
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
Push the multifunction control lever away from you to
switch the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to LOW beam.
Flash to Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction control lever toward
you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high
beam and remain on until the lever is released.
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the
lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Overhead Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved
to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either turn the
ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch.
Dimmer Control
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left
side of the instrument panel. With the
parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument
panel lights and, if so equipped, the
lighting in the door map pockets and cupholders.
121
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
3
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction control lever operates the
windshield wipers and washer when the ignition
switch is in the ON position. The lever is located
on the left side of the steering column.
Rotate the end of the multifunction control lever to the
first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed
wiper operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in
any position other than off.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction control lever to the first detent position, and then
turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay
interval. There are six delay settings, which allow you to
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle
every second to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds
between cycles.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist Feature
Push the multifunction control lever inward (toward the
steering column) to the first detent to activate a single
wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing
vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until you
release the lever.
123
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction control lever
inward (toward the steering column) to the second detent
and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
and then turn off.
3
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO (A) position.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to ”Headlights On with Wipers,” under
“Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),”
under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
flush out the residual water.
Washer Fluid Reservoir
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
125
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
3
Tilt Steering Column
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
outward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle inward until
fully engaged.
Electronic Speed Control Operation
The speed control lever located on the right side of the
steering wheel operates the system.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The
telescoping adjustment must be locked while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or
driving without the telescoping adjustment locked
could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
CANCEL
RESUME ACCEL
ON/OFF
SET DECEL
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
127
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button located
on the end of the speed control lever. The
indicator light in the instrument cluster will
illuminate to show that the speed control system is on. To turn the system off, push and release the
ON/OFF button again. The system and the indicator
light will turn off.
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
lever downward to SET DECEL and release. Remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
WARNING!
• The speed control may not engage if a different size
tire is installed on one wheel, such as the compact
spare tire.
Leaving the electronic speed control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it.
NOTE:
• Speed control will only function in 3rd, 4th, or 5th gear
when in the Autostick威 mode (if equipped).
To Deactivate
The system will disable electronic speed control without
erasing the memory if you:
• Softly tap the brake pedal,
• Depress the brake pedal, or
• Pull the speed control lever toward you to CANCEL.
3
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pushing and releasing the ON/OFF button or turning off
the ignition erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
If you deactivated the speed control without erasing the
set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), you can resume the previous set
speed. To do so, push the lever upward to RESUME
ACCEL and release. Then remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal.
To Vary the Speed Setting
When the speed control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing up and holding the lever in RESUME ACCEL.
When the lever is released, a new set speed will be
established.
Tapping the lever to RESUME ACCEL once will result in
a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is
tapped speed increases, so tapping the lever three times
will increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while speed control is set, push down
and hold the lever in SET DECEL. Release the lever when
the desired speed is reached, and a new set speed will be
established.
Tapping the lever to SET DECEL once will result in a 1
mph (1.6 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the lever is
tapped, speed decreases.
To Accelerate For Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control on Hills
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
The automatic transmission will downshift while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift is
necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
129
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
WARNING!
3
Speed control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
Overhead Console
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
an optional universal garage door opener (HomeLink威),
storage for sunglasses, and an optional power sunroof
switch.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights.
Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time
to turn off the light.
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
The HomeLink威 buttons are located in the overhead
console, and contain one, two, or three dots/lines designating the different HomeLink威 channels.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
Push on the raised bar to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
HomeLink威 Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do not train
the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the
door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage
door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured after
1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these
safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information
or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
131
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC message
states “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
to HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
while training.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
3
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
from the HomeLink威 buttons while keeping the EVIC
display in view.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink威.
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button. If
the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now
state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.”
3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the hand-held transmitter button
until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL #
TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
Then release both the HomeLink威 and hand-held transmitter buttons.
If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat Step
3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the
original hand-held transmitter.
It may take up to 30 seconds, or longer, in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you train.
If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAINING” repeat Step 3.
NOTE: After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the
garage door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “learn” or “training” button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
133
6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “training”
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink威
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
EVIC display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.) The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button for 20
seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL #
TRAINING.” Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS
CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
135
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
• Press the learn button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for rolling code.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you are having any problems or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Power Sunroof Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
137
Opening Sunroof - Manually
Press and hold the switch in the rearward position.
Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position
desired and it will stop moving. If you continue to hold
the switch in the rearward position, the sunroof will open
fully and then stop automatically. Release the switch once
the sunroof stops moving.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
Opening Sunroof - Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and then stop automatically. This is called
Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Closing Sunroof - Manually
Press and hold the switch in the forward position.
Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position
desired and it will stop moving. If you continue to hold
3
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the switch in the forward position, the sunroof will close
fully and then stop automatically. Release the switch once
the sunroof stops moving.
Closing Sunroof - Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof - Express
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button in the center of the
switch, and the sunroof will open to the vent position.
This is called Express Vent, which operates regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
139
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 60
minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening
either door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Delay Power Off to
Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
3
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12-volt electrical outlets on this vehicle.
Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse.
The front 12-volt power outlet has power available only
when the ignition is ON. This outlet will also operate a
conventional cigar lighter unit.
NOTE: If desired, the front power outlet can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power with
the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
Front Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center console outlet is powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent
engine starting.
Center Console Power Outlet
141
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from
the vehicle’s battery even when not in use (i.e., cellular
phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum
cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more
quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories
still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the
vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage.
3
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Front Cupholders
The front cupholders are located in the center console.
Rear Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining
a resting place for the rear occupants’ elbows.
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONSOLE FEATURES
Sliding Center Console Armrest
The center console armrest slides forward with three
detents to provide flexibility for comfort, cupholder use,
and shifting ease.
Sliding Console Armrest
143
Console Storage
The center console has a storage compartment located
underneath the armrest, and also contains a 12-volt
power outlet and a molded-in coin holder (designed to
hold various size coins).
Center Console
3
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The pushbutton for the rear window defroster is
located on the mode knob of the climate control
switch bank. Press this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the electric remote control heated mirrors
(if equipped). An amber light shows that the defroster is
on.
The defroster will automatically turn off after about ten
minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the switch again. To prevent excessive battery
drain, use the defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
䡵 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
䡵 Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . 159
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Performance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ System Warnings
(Customer Information Features) . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features) . . . . . . . . 172
䡵 Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
4
146
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
䡵 Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio
And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 177
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . . 184
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . . 186
▫ List Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Info Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . 189
䡵 Sales Code RER — Multimedia System —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio . . . . . 192
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威) (If Equipped) . . . 192
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped
(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU Radios Only) . . . . . 195
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
147
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode . . . . . . 197
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 202
䡵 Kicker威 High Performance Sound System With
Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Manual Air Conditioning And Heating
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
4
148
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Glove Box
— Radio
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Heated Seat Switch
ESP OFF Switch
Hazard Warning Switch
Climate Control
9 — Ignition Switch
10 — Trunk Release Switch
11 — Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
149
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
150
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION
1. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
2. Trip Odometer Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B”
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 mi (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to
reset it.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is on.
5. Tachometer
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear
range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red
area.
6. Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should turn on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly increase engine
speed (if at idle). If the light remains on, it means that the
charging system is experiencing a problem. See your
local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is turned ON. This
light will also turn on while the engine is
running if there is a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control system.
If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely
bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible,
place the shift lever in PARK, and cycle the ignition key. The
light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see
your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. In this case, you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if
the light does not come on during starting.
151
8. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F
(116°C) or greater, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the
engine OFF immediately and call for service.
4
152
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to Section 7 and follow the
warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap
paragraph.
9. Turn Signal Indicator Light
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
NOTE: A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mi (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
NOTE: Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
10. Airbag Warning Light
This light will turn on for six to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is either not on during
starting, or stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
11. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound to warn of an overheated engine condition.
When this light turns on, the engine temperature
is critically hot. The vehicle should be turned OFF
immediately and serviced as soon as possible.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions, and
do not switch off the ESP.
13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake Assist
System (BAS) Warning Light
The ESP/BAS warning light will turn on when
the key in the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position. The light should go out with the
engine running. If the light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
153
14. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light shows low engine oil pressure. The light
should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, and shut OFF the engine as soon as possible. A
single chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure
shown in Section 7.
15. High Beam Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the high beam
headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever
away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to
high beam.
4
154
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light will turn on for five to eight seconds as
a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. A chime will sound if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The Seat Belt
Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously if the
driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check
or when driving.
17. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
gear selection.
18. Front Fog Light Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the front fog lights are
on.
19. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display
This display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions
exist.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the EVIC.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP
ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
20. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS).
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity to a portion of the hydraulic system in the event of a
failure. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder drops
below a specified level.
155
Immediate repair is necessary if brake failure is indicated.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Vehicles equipped with ABS are also equipped with
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). Both the Brake
Warning Light and the ABS Light will turn on in the
event of an EBD failure. Immediate repair of the ABS is
required in the event of an EBD failure.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which could change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service performed,
and the brake fluid level checked.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the LOCK position to
the ON position. The light should turn on for approximately two seconds and then turn off. The light will
4
156
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
remain on if the parking brake is applied or if a brake
fault is detected. If the parking brake is not applied and
the light remains on, or if the light does not turn on, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: The light will turn on when the ignition switch
is in the ON position and the parking brake is applied.
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
21. Vehicle Security Alarm (VSA) Indicator Light — If
Equipped
The VSA Indicator Light flashes rapidly when the VSA is
arming, and slowly when the VSA is armed.
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
157
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
4
158
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
23. Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally
if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
24. Low Fuel Warning Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank.
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
called OBD. The OBD system monitors engine
and automatic transmission control systems. The
MIL will turn on when the key is in the ON position
before engine start. If the MIL does not come on when
turning the key from LOCK to ON, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
The MIL flashes to alert you to serious conditions that
could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
159
equipped with steering wheel-mounted buttons (described in this section) are also equipped with the EVIC.
The EVIC consists of the following:
• System Status
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
• Tire Pressure Monitor System
• Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)
• Compass Display
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display. It is located in the
instrument cluster below the speedometer. Vehicles
• UConnect威 Hands-Free Communication System Displays (If Equipped)
• Navigation System Screens (If Equipped)
• Audio Mode Display
4
160
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Surround Sound Modes (If Equipped with DriverSelectable Surround [DSS])
also functions as a remote sound system control. Refer to
“Remote Sound System Controls” in this section.
• Performance Features
SCROLL Button
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, Performance Pages, Navigation (If
Equipped), System Status Messages, and Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features). The SCROLL button also functions as a remote
sound system control. Refer to “Remote Sound System
Controls” in this section.
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel.
MENU Button
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
Functions, Performance Pages, Navigation (If
Equipped), System Warnings, System Status,
Personal Settings, Telephone (If Equipped), and Surround Sound (If Equipped).
FUNCTION SELECT Button
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept
a selection. The FUNCTION SELECT button
AUDIO MODE Button
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. Along with
compass reading and outside temperature, this
screen will display radio and media mode
information depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
Refer to “Remote Sound System Controls” in this section.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages:
• Left/Right Door Ajar
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi [1.6 km] with
either turn signal on)
• Oil Change Required
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
161
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
• Channel # Transmit
• Channel # Training
• Channel # Trained
• Clearing Channels
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Channels Cleared
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Did Not Train
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK
• Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime)
4
162
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime)
• 1/8 Mile
• Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime)
• 1/4 Mile
• Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime)
• Instantaneous G-Force
• Check TPM System (with a single chime)
• Peak G-Force
• ESP Off
• Digital Speedometer
• Check Gascap
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
• Insert Key/Turn To Run
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10
seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
• Upshift
• Stereo (If Equipped with Driver-Selectable Surround
Sound [DSS])
• Audio Surround (If Equipped with Driver-Selectable
Surround Sound [DSS])
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
• Braking Distance
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
163
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
refer to the following procedure.
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
• Trip A
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
• Elapsed Time
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance To Empty
• Trip B
• Display Units of Measure in
4
164
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following.
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 mi (48 km) estimated
driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text
display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will continue until
the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount
of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the ⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text
and a new DTE value will display.
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
Display Units of Measure in
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within
three seconds of resetting the currently-displayed function (>Reset ALL will display during this three-second
window).
165
Performance Features
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
4
166
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Performance Features include the following:
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
• Braking Distance
• 1/8 Mile
• 1/4 Mile
• Instantaneous G-Force
• Peak G-Force
• Digital Speedometer
To access, press and release the MENU button until
Performance Features displays in the EVIC. Press the
SCROLL button to cycle through the features. Press the
FUNCTION SELECT button to select a feature.
The following describes each feature and its operation:
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within
10 seconds.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when
conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph
(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
• The time will continue to display until the FUNCTION
SELECT button is pressed.
• Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the
current run time and display the vehicle’s best 0-60
mph (0-100 km/h) time.
• To clear the vehicle’s best 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time,
press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for
five seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Braking Distance
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was
depressed.
• This feature will only function when applying the
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
• The word “READY” will flash when conditions are
met for the event to begin.
• The distance and speed measurements display while
the event is taking place.
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
167
• The distance and speed measurements will continue to
display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is
pressed.
• Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the
current run and prepare the cluster to record a new
run.
1/8 Mile, 1/4 Mile
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
vehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) within 30 seconds
and the vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/8 mile (1/4
mile).
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8
mile (1/4 mile) in less then 30 seconds.
4
168
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The time and speed will continue to display until the
FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed.
• Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the
current run and display the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile
(1/4 mile) run.
• When a force greater than zero is measured, the
display will update the value as it climbs. As the
G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
• Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the
peak force values.
• To clear the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) run,
press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for
five seconds.
Digital Speedometer
When selected, this screen displays vehicle speed and
records top speed.
Instantaneous G-Force
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force
(longitude and latitude) along with a friction circle that
displays the directions of the forces.
• Press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for
three seconds to toggle between current speed and top
speed.
Peak G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
values (two longitude and two latitude).
• To reset top speed, quickly press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button when top speed is displayed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Display
COMPASS Button
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
COMPASS button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360
degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
169
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approximately two seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass”
displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display in
the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
message turns off. The compass will now function normally.
4
170
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
using the following procedure:
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the overhead console. This is where the compass sensor is
located.
Compass Variance Map
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approximately two seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance”
message and the last variance zone number displays in
the EVIC.
4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the
proper variance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Press and release the COMPASS button to exit.
Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) – If
Equipped
Press and release the MENU button until “Surround
Sound” displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides information on the current surround mode.
• Stereo
• Audio Surround
171
While in the Surround Sound menu, press the FUNCTION SELECT button to change surround modes.
System Warnings (Customer Information
Features)
Press and release the MENU button until “SYSTEM
WARNINGS” displays in the EVIC. Then, press the
SCROLL button to display anyone of the following
choices.
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
• Tire Pressure
Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING
THE SPARE TIRE).
4
172
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
choices.
Language
When in this display you may select one of three languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English, Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you continue, the
information will display in the selected language.
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the UConnect威 language selection. Refer to “Language Selection” under
“Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
When ON is selected, both doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit
When ON is selected, both doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Remote Key Unlock
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st
Press is selected, you must press the RKE UNLOCK
button twice to unlock the passenger door. When All
Doors 1st Press is selected, both of the doors will unlock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
on the first press of the RKE UNLOCK button. To make
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors
1st Press” appears.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE LOCK button is pressed. This feature may be
selected with or without the flash lights on lock/unlock
feature. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
173
Headlamps On with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO (A) position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3.
Delay Turning Headlights Off
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
4
174
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
Turn-by-Turn Navigation — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions will
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), power
sunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening a vehicle door
will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “Off,” “45
sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60 min.”
appears.
Display Units of Measure In
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or
“METRIC” appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “apparent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio signals.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals: AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary; and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
175
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
4
176
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls, and
6-disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped) will remain active
for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned
OFF. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Delay Power Off to
Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
REQ Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
177
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free
Phone) — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
4
178
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free Phone) — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
between the time and frequency displays.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at step
2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
179
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
4
180
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character Display
No program type or unNone
defined
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
Classical
Classicl
Classic Rock
Cls Rock
College
College
Country
Country
Foreign Language
Language
Program Type
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
16-Digit Character Display
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R & B
Sports
Talk
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character Display
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
181
• DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
• DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
4
182
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
NOTE: The available selections for each of the above
entries varies depending upon the disc.
NOTE: These selections can only be made while playing
a DVD.
• Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items, and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
183
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes.
4
184
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
185
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
4
186
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD, MP3/MWA modes.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio to the Radio mode.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
187
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
4
188
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
WMA Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
44.1 and 48
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
WMA
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
189
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
4
190
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
For UConnect威 “Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to
“Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
Dolby威
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby威 Laboratories.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
191
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited
DTS™
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
SALES CODE RER — MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The RER Multimedia system contains a radio, Sirius
Satellite Radio player, navigation system, CD/DVD
player, USB port, 20-gigabyte hard drive (HDD), and the
UConnect威 Hands-Free Bluetooth威 cellular system.
4
192
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If your vehicle is not equipped with UConnect威,
the unit will respond with a “Not Equipped With
UConnect威” message when selecting controls related to
this feature.
A 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows easy menu selection, while the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes
more than 1,000 words for audio, navigation, entertainment, and hands-free mobile phone use.
The satellite navigation capability combines a GlobalPositioning System (GPS)-based navigation system with
an integrated color screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection menus, and instructions for selecting a
variety of destinations and routes.
A shared HDD for the navigation system, the database,
and other radio features allows uploads of music and
photos from CDs or through the USB port. The Gracenote
database finds the artist, track, and title for the music.
Other special features include direct tune, music type
selections, traffic messaging (optional), easy store presets,
backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a
backup camera, and on some models, a dual display
screen operation. Refer to your “Navigation User’s
Manual” for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect姞) (If Equipped)
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock Setting Procedure
The GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to the
time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The
satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
and daylight savings information is set.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words
“Time: GPS Time” are displayed at the top of the screen,
proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.
3. If the words “Time: User Clock” are displayed at the
top of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where
the words “User Clock” are displayed. The GPS time
setting menu will appear on the screen.
193
4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4
194
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are displayed to change the current setting.
Setting the User Clock
If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the
system clock, you can manually adjust the time by
performing the following:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words
“Time: User Clock” are displayed at the top of the screen,
proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.
3. If the words “Time: GPS Time” are displayed at the top
of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where the
words “GPS Time” are displayed. The user clock time
setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the system is turned off.
Proceed as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
195
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account at no additional charge. For further information, call the toll-free
number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at
www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
4
196
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the Tune/Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
ESN/SID Access With REU Radio
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center
of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and
release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your
vehicle will display.
Selecting Satellite Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
197
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
4
198
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button — REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will display information about
Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing
the INFO button again will close the INFO screen.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — REU Radio
Pressing this button provides a MUSIC TYPES list from
which you can make a selection. Once a selection is
made, you can seek up, or down, or scan the channels
and the radio will tune to the next station matching the
selected format. There is no time-out for this screen.
Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the
MUSIC TYPE screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down,
and scan will no longer be based on your selection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
199
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
4
200
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
KICKER姞 HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM
WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) –
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio
amplifier that provides 5.1-channel surround sound from
any stereo audio source. A new feature of the Kicker威
audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound
for any audio source.
“Audio Surround” is optimized for front seat passengers
for any audio source. This surround effect is available for
audio from any source – AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or
AUX – and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-Selectable
Surround Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
DSS modes for audio sources are “Stereo” and “Audio
Surround,” which is surround sound equalized for the
front seat occupants. The “Video Surround” mode is
described under “Kicker威 Mobile Surround (KMS1).威”
Please note that DSS effects are dependent on the mix of
the original recording. Some audio will sound better in
DSS modes, others in Stereo mode.
When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set automatically. Fader control is available to add more surround audio if desired.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the
surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o’clock
positions.
Vehicles equipped with steering wheel-mounted buttons
are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactive
display. This is located in the instrument cluster below
the speedometer.
VOLUME Button
The VOLUME button controls the sound level
of the sound system. Press the top of the
VOLUME button to increase the sound level.
Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to
decrease the sound level.
201
AUDIO MODE Button
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen
displays radio and media mode information
depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
If the Compass/Temp/Audio screen is already displayed
when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the
mode will change (i.e., from AM to FM, to Media mode,
etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle).
FUNCTION SELECT Button
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SELECT
button to operate various radio, media, and
Universal Customer Interface (UCI) functions
(i.e., advance presets, select next folder, jump to or start
playing songs in playlists, etc., depending on which radio
is in the vehicle and if equipped with UCI).
4
202
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCROLL Button
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to seek
up and down radio stations, tracks, chapters,
files, etc., depending on which radio is in the
vehicle.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
203
Blower Control
Use this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(Off) position. There are four blower
speeds.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
The Manual Temperature Control consists of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner pushbuttons.
4
204
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. The blue area of the
scale indicates cooler temperatures
while the red area indicates warmer
temperatures.
Mode Control
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator) for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel and the center console. These outlets
can be adjusted to direct airflow.
Use this control to choose from several
patterns of air distribution. You can
select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the control, or
a blend of two of these modes.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the instrument panel,
center console and floor outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
205
NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
• Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting.
• Floor
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix,
Defrost, and Floor or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Conditioning Snowflake button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel
economy, use these modes only when necessary.
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demist outlets.
• Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demist outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require
extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
• Recirculation Control
Use this button to block the flow of outside
air from coming into the passenger compartment. A light will illuminate when the system is in recirculation mode. Use the recirculation mode to provide maximum A/C performance
in hot ambient conditions, or to block outside odors,
dust, etc.
4
206
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather may cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture build-up inside the vehicle. Select
the Outside Air position for maximum defogging.
• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
when the recirculation button is pressed.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Air Conditioning Control
Use this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A
light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning
System is engaged
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for a few seconds.
• MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
• Economy Mode
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
off the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer
to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this manual
for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
207
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE: Recirculation without A/C should not be used
for long periods as fogging may occur.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
Floor, Mix, or Defrost mode. The air is directed at the area
of the windows through which you view the outside
mirrors.
4
208
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The A/C Air Filter will reduce, but not eliminate, diesel
and agricultural smells. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
in Section 7 of this manual for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedules” in Section 8 of this
manual for filter service intervals.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
209
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . 222
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ 5-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Extremely Cold Weather
(Below ⫺20°F Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
䡵 AutoStick威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ AutoStick威 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ AutoStick威 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 229
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
5
212
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ TCS (Traction Control System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
▫ BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
▫ ESP (Electronic Stability Program) . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Synchronizing ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
▫ ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESP/TCS Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 250
䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
STARTING AND OPERATING
213
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Tire Rotation — Standard Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Tire Rotation — Optional Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 264
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . . 276
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ 6.1L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 278
5
214
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
• Be sure to turn OFF the engine and remove the key
from the ignition switch if you want to rest or
sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by
inadvertently moving the shift lever. Accidents
can also be caused by pressing the accelerator
pedal. This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system, resulting in overheating and vehicle
fire, which may cause serious or fatal injuries.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
215
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
5
216
STARTING AND OPERATING
Keyless Go
This function allows the driver to
operate the ignition switch with
the push of a button, as long as the
ENGINE START/STOP button is
installed and the Keyless Go ignition key (FOBIK) is in the passenger compartment.
Installing And Removing The Engine Start/Stop
Button
Keyless Go Functions — With Driver’s Foot Off The
Brake Pedal (In PARK Position)
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to activate the radio, wipers, and windows.
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice to
activate the heating/air conditioning (HVAC) controls,
and the instrument cluster.
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times to
turn off the ignition switch.
1. Remove the ignition key (FOBIK).
Keyless Go Functions - With Driver’s Foot On The
Brake Pedal (PARK or NEUTRAL Gear Position Only)
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the
ignition switch.
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to operate all of the accessories.
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed from the ignition switch (WIN) for regular ignition key (FOBIK) use.
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice to start
the engine.
STARTING AND OPERATING
217
Normal Starting
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the
accelerator pedal.
NOTE: Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the
accelerator pedal.
Press and hold your foot on the brake pedal and then press
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button twice. The
starter motor will engage and continue to run, and it will
disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the
engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, wait 10 to 15 seconds,
then repeat the normal starting procedure.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Press and hold your foot on the brake pedal.
2. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position
and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter
motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start,
the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait
10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting procedure.
Extremely Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
5
218
STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to Section 6 for proper jump-starting
procedures and follow them carefully.
Clearing A Flooded Engine - Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the brake pedal with your left foot, push and
hold the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor with
your right foot, and then press and release the ENGINE
START/STOP button twice. The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and
the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
normal starting procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine - Using Fob With Integrated
Key
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the normal starting procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
219
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
5
220
STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
General Information
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, dependent upon:
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
• Altitude
• Vehicle loading
• Driving style
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Shift lever position
• Accelerator position
• Vehicle speed
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, dependent on the driving style, the driving situation, and
the road characteristics.
NOTE:
• After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to
allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating,
especially when the engine is cold.
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle
the key to the LOCK position before restarting. Transmission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds
after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK
position first.
221
• The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the
break-in period. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the brake pedal must be firmly depressed before
the shift lock will release.
Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the
engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied.
Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive. The
vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift
lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position.
5
222
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those
in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always shift
the transmission into PARK, remove the key from the
ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the key is
removed from the ignition, the transmission shift lever
is locked in the PARK position, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should
never leave unattended children inside a vehicle.
Over-Temperature Mode
The transmission electronics constantly monitor the transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds normal operating temperature, the transmission will change
the way it shifts to help control the condition. This may
result in a slightly different feeling or response during
normal operation in DRIVE position. After the transmission cools down, it will return to normal operation.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock (BTSI) system that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON
position, and the brake pedal must be depressed.
BTSI Override
There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move
the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical
system malfunction occurs (i.e., dead battery). To access
the override (using a flat-bladed screwdriver), carefully
remove the override cover which is located on the right
of the shift lever gate.
STARTING AND OPERATING
223
5-Speed Automatic Transmission
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
5
Brake Interlock Override
To activate the override, first insert the key into the
ignition switch and turn it to the ACC or ON position.
Then, press the pink-colored tab through the access port
with a small flat-bladed screwdriver or alike. While
pressing the override tab, move the shift lever out of the
PARK position. When complete, return the override
cover to its original position.
Shift Lever
224
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges
PARK
PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
WARNING!
Never use PARK position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully
seated.
• Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
panel to ensure it is in the P position.
STARTING AND OPERATING
225
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is
moved out of PARK before the ignition is turned
from the LOCK to ON position.
Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason
with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in
transmission damage.
REVERSE
Shift into REVERSE gear only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
NEUTRAL
In NEUTRAL, no power is transmitted from the engine to
the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle
can be moved freely (pushed or towed). Do not engage
NEUTRAL position while driving except to coast when
the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g., on icy roads).
The engine may be started in this range. Use this range
for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
5
226
STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts and the best fuel economy.
The transmission automatically upshifts through 5th
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using
the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy
trailers, use the AutoStick威 mode and select the “3”
range.
Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures
During cold temperature operation, you may notice
delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency.
Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could result in transmission
damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode.
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in
the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission
will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Second gear will operate in the DRIVE position. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
STARTING AND OPERATING
A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service. To reset the
transmission, use the following procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position.
3. Turn OFF the engine.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Move the shift lever to the desired range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
227
Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears.
Permanent Transmission Limp Home Mode
Permanent Limp Home Mode will be activated if the
transmission enters temporary Limp Home Mode three
times. Follow the reset procedure described under “Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode” in this section.
In Permanent Limp Home Mode, PARK, REVERSE, and
NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Second gear will
operate in the DRIVE position. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may illuminate.
5
228
STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOSTICK姞
Autostick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of
the vehicle. Autostick威 allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Autostick姞 Operation
By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position, it can be
moved from side to side. This allows the driver to select
a higher or lower range of gears. Moving the shift lever to
the left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an
upshift. The gear position will display in the instrument
cluster on the transmission range indicator.
NOTE:
• In Autostick威 mode, the transmission will only shift
up and down when the driver manually moves the
shift lever right (D+) or left (D-).
• An UPSHIFT message will appear in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) portion of the instrument cluster when using Autostick威. This message
appears in order to alert the driver to upshift to the
next gear. The UPSHIFT message will display while
operating the vehicle at higher engine revolutions per
minute (RPM).
You can shift in or out of the Autostick威 mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. When
you wish to engage Autostick威, simply move the shift lever
to the right (D+) or left (D-) while in the DRIVE position.
The transmission will remain in the current gear until an
upshift or downshift is chosen. When you wish to disengage Autostick威, hold the shift lever to the right for at least
STARTING AND OPERATING
one second. The transmission will now operate automatically, shifting between the five available gears.
Autostick姞 General Information
• You can start out in 1st or 2nd gear. The system will
ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to 1st
gear when coming to a stop.
• Starting out in 2nd gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
• Avoid using speed control when Autostick威 is engaged.
• The transmission will not automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached while Autostick威 is
engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
Autostick威 is engaged.
229
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear
(driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
5
230
STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water, and if there are any obstacles
in the way, before driving through the standing
water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
231
CAUTION!
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
232
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8
km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
PARKING BRAKE
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use PARK position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first and then apply the parking brake.
STARTING AND OPERATING
233
When parking on a hill, it is important to apply the
parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of
PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels
toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
parking brake, push the parking brake pedal down and
then remove your foot from the pedal. To release the
parking brake, push down on the parking brake pedal
and then release.
5
Parking Brake
The brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on
when the parking brake is applied and the ignition
switch is ON.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
234
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
STARTING AND OPERATING
235
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents
the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
control of available braking forces applied to the rear
axle.
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
• Brake pedal pulsations, and
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-Lock:
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
5
236
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
•
•
•
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by
improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness
and may lead to an accident. Pumping makes the stopping distance
longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent the natural
laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
Anti-Lock Brake Light
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Light monitors
the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will come
on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on.
If the ABS Light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS Light does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
have the bulb repaired as soon as possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the ABS and EBD systems are not functioning.
Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
237
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of
the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid
temperature and it should be avoided when possible.
Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
5
238
STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system commonly referred to as ESP. This
system includes the ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System), the
TCS (Traction Control System), the BAS (Brake Assist
System), and the ESP (Electronic Stability Program).
These systems work together to enhance both vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions.
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydraulic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. For
more information about ABS, refer to “Anti-Lock Brake
System” in Section 5.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
STARTING AND OPERATING
TCS (Traction Control System)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking
situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes.
This can help reduce braking distances.
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
239
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
5
240
STARTING AND OPERATING
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The ESP/TCS Indicator Light located in the
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
active. The ESP/TCS Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESP/TCS Indicator
Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
241
The ESP system has three available operating modes:
ESP On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESP. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving situations.
The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the
threshold for ESP activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESP normally allows.
5
242
STARTING AND OPERATING
The ESP OFF switch is located in the switch bank near the
bottom center of the instrument panel. To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch
and the ESP/TCS Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn
the ESP ON again, momentarily depress the ESP OFF
switch and the ESP/TCS Indicator Light will turn off.
ESP OFF Switch
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily depressing the ESP
OFF switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn the ESP ON again by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
Full Off
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, all TCS and ESP stability features are turned
OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, depress and hold the
ESP OFF switch for five seconds while the vehicle is
stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a
chime will sound, the ESP/TCS Indicator Light will
illuminate, and the ⬙ESP OFF⬙ message will display in the
vehicle odometer. Press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button located on the instrument cluster to clear
STARTING AND OPERATING
this message. The “ESP OFF” message may appear in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4. To turn ESP ON again, momentarily depress the
ESP OFF switch.
NOTE: The ⬙ESP OFF⬙ message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved
into the PARK position from any position other than
PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This
will occur when the message was previously cleared.
WARNING!
In the ESP “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are cancelled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is
unavailable.
243
NOTE: When the ESP is switched OFF, a feature of the
system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin
across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential.
If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel
and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. To improve the vehicle’s traction
when driving with tire chains, or when starting off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch
to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily depressing the
ESP OFF switch.
5
244
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
With the ESP switched OFF, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESP is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESP system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. The “Full Off”
ESP mode is intended for off-highway or off-road only.
Synchronizing ESP
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
combined with BAS indicator. If the power
supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or
discharged), the ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light may illuminate with the engine running. If this
should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the
left and then to the right. The ESP/BAS Malfunction
Indicator Light should go out. However, if the light
remains on, have the ESP and BAS checked at your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
combined with the BAS indicator. The yellow
ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and the
yellow ESP/TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position. They should go out with the
engine running.
The system will turn the ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator
Light on continuously while the engine is running if it
detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or
both. If the light remains on after several ignition cycles
and you have driven the vehicle several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and the
ESP is synchronized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The ESP/TCS Indicator Light and the ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light will turn on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
245
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned OFF previously.
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when the ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
5
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
246
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards, and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
STARTING AND OPERATING
247
Tire Sizing Chart
TIRE SIZING TERMS
Size Designation:
P = Passenger Car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger Car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
248
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SIZING TERMS
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,
249
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN
on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you
will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
250
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING
251
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on your vehicle’s placard.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295
kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs [295 kg]).
5
252
STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392
kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING
253
5
254
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
1. Safety—
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
accidents.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire
failure.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that
result in tire failure.
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You
could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the
other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended
cold tire inflation pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING
255
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier
tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling
resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side
B-pillar.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure
information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
5
Tire Placard Location
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
256
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mi (1 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious accident.
Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
257
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or six, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
5
258
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
Refer to the paragraph on “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in
Section 6.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30
mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
259
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
5
260
STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting
in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and
stress to steering and suspension components. You
could lose control and have an accident resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
• Fast tire wear.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
• Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your
authorized dealer for proper diagnosis.
261
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recommended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
5
262
STARTING AND OPERATING
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four. Failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear patterns. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the
recommended tire rotation frequency. Remember, more
frequent rotation is permissible if desired. Also, correct
for anything causing rapid or unusual wear prior to
performing the tire rotation.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Rotation — Standard Tires
The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped
with all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown in
the following diagram.
263
Tire Rotation — Optional Tires
The suggested rotation method is the “side-to-side” as
shown in the following diagram. This method is required
due to different size tires on the front and rear of the
vehicle.
5
264
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
• The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
• The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mi (1 km)
after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires
– General Information” in this section for information
on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
• The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature
effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.
• The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the
recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire
pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM]
Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire
pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light
will turn off once the system receives the updated tire
STARTING AND OPERATING
pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
− For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours)
placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to
20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale
Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but
the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this
situation, the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
265
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
5
266
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module,
• Four TPM sensors,
STARTING AND OPERATING
• CORAX Receiver module,
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
267
Front, Right Rear) for three seconds and a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values flashing.
• TPM Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be
used in place of any of the four road tires. A spare with a
pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the
TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display one or
more low pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right
5
268
STARTING AND OPERATING
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those flashing in
the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing, and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for
three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
STARTING AND OPERATING
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer
flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors,
or equipped with the incorrect type of TPM sensors.
269
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
5
270
STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
6.1L Engine
The 6.1L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality premium unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or
higher.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or E85
ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol,
it does not have the negative effects of methanol.
271
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
5
272
STARTING AND OPERATING
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance
and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat.
If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light
smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact
your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as
octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
273
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk/liftgate closed when driving your
vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
5
274
STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
Fuel Fill Cap
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
275
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If this occurs, tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the problem
continues, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System” in Section 7.
5
276
STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
277
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
5
278
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWRs.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
䡵 TIREFIT Tire Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
䡵 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
With A Tow Dolly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
6
280
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The hazard warning switch is located in the switch bank
near the bottom center of the instrument panel. Depress
the switch to activate the flashers. When activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a
second time to turn off the flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
hazard warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
NOTE: With extended use, the hazard warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — Slow down.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Hazard Warning Switch
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the Fan control to HI. This allows the heater core to act as
a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F
(116°C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
281
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood
yourself, refer to Section 7 and follow the warnings
under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
TIREFIT TIRE REPAIR
Small punctures, particularly those in the tread, can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
6
282
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
The TIREFIT system is located under an access panel in
the trunk.
Tire Fit Kit
1. Air pump hose
TIREFIT Location
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Power plug and cable
AIR PUMP switch
Pressure gauge
TIREFIT sealant bottle
TIREFIT sealant hose
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
•
•
•
•
•
Do not attempt to repair a tire on the side of the vehicle close to
traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit
when operating the jack or repairing a tire.
Cuts or punctures larger than approximately 0.16 in (4 mm), tire
damage caused by driving with extremely low tire pressure or on
a flat tire, or a damaged wheel can pose a hazard while driving.
TIREFIT should not be used in such circumstances. Do not drive
the vehicle under such circumstances. Contact your nearest authorized dealer for assistance.
283
Sealing Tire with TIREFIT
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position, turn OFF
the engine, and set the parking brake.
3. Remove the TIREFIT kit from the trunk.
4. Pull the power plug 2 and the TIREFIT sealant hose 6
out from the TIREFIT kit.
Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contact
with hair, eyes or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin: It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Any contact with eyes or skin should be
flushed immediately with plenty of water. If clothing comes in
contact with TIREFIT, change clothing as soon as possible.
5. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve on the deflated
tire.
In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse
mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
7. Insert the power plug 2 into the power point on the
instrument panel.
Keep away from open flame or heat source.
6. Screw the fitting at the end of TIREFIT sealant hose 6
coming from the sealant bottle 5 onto the tire valve.
8. Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever in
PARK and start the engine.
6
284
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Press the switch 3 on the air pump to I (ON). The air
pump should start to inflate the tire and the tire sealant
(white fluid) will flow from the sealant bottle 5 through
the TIREFIT sealant hose 6 and into the tire.
10. Allow the air pump to run for five minutes and then
read the pressure gauge 4. If the tire inflates to 26 psi (1.8
bar) or greater, proceed to Step 19 of this procedure. If
not, proceed to the following step.
11. Press the AIR PUMP switch 3 to 0 (OFF). Then,
disconnect the TIREFIT system from the tire and place it
back in the vehicle.
12. Release the parking brake and drive the vehicle back
and forth approximately 30 ft (9.1 m) to distribute the
sealant more evenly within the tire.
13. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
14. Move the shift lever to the PARK position, turn OFF
the engine, and set the parking brake.
15. Disconnect the air pump hose 1 from the underside
of the sealant bottle 5 by flipping the hose valve open.
16. Connect the air pump hose valve to the tire valve and
flip the hose valve closed.
17. Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever in
PARK and start the engine.
18. Press the switch 3 on the air pump to I (ON). The air
pump should inflate the tire to at least 26 psi (1.8 bar)
within five minutes. If the tire inflates to this level,
proceed to the following step. NOTE: If a tire pressure of
26 psi (1.8 bar) is not obtained within five minutes, the
tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
19. With a tire pressure of no less than 26 psi (1.8 bar)
press the AIR PUMP switch 3 to 0 (OFF) and turn off the
engine. Then, disconnect the TIREFIT system from the
tire and place it back in the vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
20. Release the parking brake and drive the vehicle for
approximately 10 minutes to ensure optimum distribution of the tire sealant within the tire.
21. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
22. Move the shift lever to the PARK position, turn OFF
the engine, and set the parking brake.
23. Disconnect the air pump hose 1 from the underside
of the sealant bottle 5 by flipping the hose valve open.
24. Connect the air pump hose valve to the tire valve and
flip the hose valve closed.
25. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the pressure
gauge 4. If the pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or greater,
proceed to the following step. NOTE: If the pressure is
less than 19 psi (1.3 bar), the tire is too badly damaged.
Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for
assistance.
285
26. Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever in
PARK and start the engine.
27. Inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
pressure label on the driver-side latch pillar by pressing
the switch 3 on the air pump to I (ON) and watching the
pressure gauge. When the tire pressure is set to the
pressure indicated on the tire pressure label, press the
AIR PUMP switch 3 to 0 (OFF) and turn off the engine.
28. Disconnect the TIREFIT system from the tire and
reinstall the valve cap.
29. Place the sealant kit back in the trunk of the vehicle.
Replace the sealant bottle at your nearest authorized
MOPAR威 parts dealership.
30. Have the tire inspected at the earliest opportunity at
an authorized dealer or tire service center.
6
286
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE:
• If a pressure of at least 19 psi (1.3 bar) cannot be
maintained in the tire, the tire is too badly damaged.
Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for
assistance.
• Do not operate the electric air pump for more than
eight minutes to avoid overheating. The air pump may
be used again once it has cooled down.
• Replace the TIREFIT sealant bottle 5 once every four
years to assure optimum operation of the system.
• If TIREFIT is liquid, clean water and a damp cloth will
remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel
components. Once TIREFIT sealing material has dried,
it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
• Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire has
been inspected.
JUMP STARTING
WARNING!
•
•
•
•
•
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised.
It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be hurt by the fan.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way.
Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine
has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle
has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done
improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery fluid to
contact eyes, skin, or clothing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities
of water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes.
Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output
that exceeds 12 Volts.
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected
and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
287
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
3. Set the parking brake, place the automatic transmission in PARK, and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position on both vehicles.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
4. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical loads.
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach, but
do not allow the vehicles to touch one another.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
5. Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote
jump-start positive battery post (+) in the engine compartment. Connect the other end of the same cable to the
positive terminal of the booster battery. Refer to the
following illustration for jump-starting connections.
6
288
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine ground (-)
of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure
you have a good contact on the engine ground. Refer to
the following illustration for jump-starting connections.
7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery. Let the engine idle a few minutes. Then, start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
NOTE: Refer to ⬙Synchronizing ESP⬙ under ⬙Electronic
Stability Program⬙ in Section 5 if the ESP/BAS light (in
the instrument cluster) remains on continuously after
starting the engine of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
Jump-Starting
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing
or towing.
• Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode.
• During cold weather when temperatures are below the freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought above the
freezing point before attempting jump-start.
289
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE and DRIVE. Usually, the least accelerator pedal
pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective.
NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Program,” or “Traction Control” in Section 5.
6
290
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between “1st” and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage
may result.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 35
mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flat-bed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission is only permitted within the following
limitations.
291
With The Ignition Key
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions: The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL, the distance
to be traveled must not exceed 30 mi (48 km), and the
towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transmission
geartrain failure. If the transmission is not operative or if
the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 mi (48 km), the
vehicle must be transported using a flat-bed truck.
6
292
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
• If the transmission is not operative or if the
vehicle is to be towed more than 30 mi (48 km),
then the only approved method of towing is with
a flat-bed truck. Damage to the transmission may
result.
• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON position,
not the ACC position. Make certain the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With
A Tow Dolly
The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this
vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . 297
▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . . . 303
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ A/C Air Filter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
7
294
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ Front And Rear Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . 311
▫ Steering Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 319
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders . . . . 328
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
▫ Integrated Power Module (IPM) . . . . . . . . . . . 329
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . 331
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
䡵 Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight,
And Park/Turn Light — Models With High
Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlights . . . . . . . 337
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Front And Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Tail/Turn/Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
295
▫ Center Tail/Backup Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) . . . 340
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
䡵 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
7
296
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.1L
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump-Start Positive Battery Post
Fuses (Integrated Power Module)
Coolant Pressure Cap
Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
Coolant Bottle
6 — Power Steering Fluid
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Windshield Washer Fluid Bottle
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
297
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
7
298
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Trip Odometer button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
serviced, recently had a dead battery, or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, the vehicle may fail the test.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL.
This vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if this vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of this vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if the vehicle was recently
1. Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn the ignition key to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that the
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that the vehicle’s OBD II
system is ready, and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If the OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If this vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive the vehicle
299
as you normally would in order for the OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether the vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation, you should have the vehicle
serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station
can fail the vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
7
300
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these service manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.
301
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 mi (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
7
302
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SM or
SM/CF, and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-10725.
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
engine oil, such as Mobil 1威 SAE 0W-40 or equivalent.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 0W-40 engine oil is preferred for use in 6.1L engines
within the operating temperatures shown in the engine
oil viscosity chart. SAE 5W-40 engine oil is also allowed
for use in 6.1L engines. The proper SAE viscosity grade of
engine oil should be selected based on the following
recommendation and be within the operating temperature shown in the engine oil viscosity chart.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
303
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension
Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic
tensioner. Therefore, no belt tension adjustments are
required. However, belt and belt tensioner condition
should be inspected periodically and replaced if required. Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and
failure. Low generator belt tension can cause battery
failure.
Inspect belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, glazing, or
frayed cords and replace if there is indication of damage
that could result in belt failure. Also, check belt routing to
make sure there is no interference between the belts and
other engine components. See your authorized dealer for
service.
7
304
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emissions control. New plugs should be
installed at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the catalytic converter. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the proper type of spark plug for
use in your vehicle.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for engine
air cleaner filter maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road conditions” maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at
which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.
Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the
fuel tank, filter replacement may be necessary. See your
authorized dealer for service.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emissions control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
305
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
7
306
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this should occur,
safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop, shut the
engine OFF, and allow the vehicle to cool. Thereafter,
obtain service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s
specifications immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
307
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting (Refer to Jump
Starting in Section 6 of this manual).
Battery Location
7
308
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid to contact
your eyes, skin, or clothing. Don’t lean over a battery
when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on
skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of
water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or
sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to touch
each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should
not be disconnected and should only be replaced with
a battery of the same type (vented).
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
309
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
310
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation. To
replace the filter, remove the access door in the cowl
screen by pressing the retaining clips. Slide the lid on the
filter adapter forward and down and remove the used
filter. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter indicate this).
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the
recommended air conditioning filter replacement intervals.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer. No chemical flushes should be used in any
power steering system; only the approved lubricant may
be used.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine OFF to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
Front And Rear Suspension Ball Joints
The suspension ball joints should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed.
311
Steering Linkage
The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for
external leakage or damage when other maintenance is
performed.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including seat tracks,
door hinges, trunk hinges, and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating,
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism,
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
7
312
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Windshield Washers
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
flush out the residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
313
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Exhaust Gas” under “Safety Tips” in Section 2.
7
314
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for
any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, and Refill
The system should be drained, flushed, and refilled at the
intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedule in Section
8.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Selection of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct coolant type.
315
CAUTION!
• Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT
engine coolants may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT
coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon as possible.
• Do not use plain water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based coolants. Use of propylene
glycol-based coolants is not recommended.
7
316
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to five years or 100,000 mi (160
000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you
use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
When adding coolant:
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology).
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant
and to ensure that coolant will return to the radiator from
the coolant recovery bottle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
317
Disposal of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle
should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
7
318
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine, which contains
aluminum components.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any
heat source or moving component, which may cause heat
damage or mechanical wear.
319
Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.
Fuel System
The Electronic Fuel Injection high-pressure fuel system’s
hoses and quick connect fittings have unique material
characteristics that provide adequate sealing and resist
attack by deteriorated gasoline.
You are urged to use only the manufacturer’s specified
hoses with quick connect fittings, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It
is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick
connect fittings that have been removed during service.
7
320
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Care should be taken with installing quick connect
fittings to ensure they are properly installed and fully
connected. See your authorized dealer for service.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake and Power Steering Hoses
When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling
indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention
should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest
to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
NOTE:
• Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid, and
brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations
to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
321
necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping
of hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during
vehicle operation), should be noted before a hose is
replaced based on leakage.
Master Cylinder - Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
• Inspect the brake hoses whenever the brake system is
serviced and at every engine oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing, or
worn spots. If there is any evidence of cracking,
scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be replaced
immediately. Eventual deterioration of the hose can
take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
7
322
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type.
WARNING!
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
• Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point, or is unidentified as to specification,
may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
• The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,
visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe
damage to the transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
fluid level accurately.
323
Fluid and Filter Changes
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the
recommended transmission fluid and filter change intervals.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed.
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type. It is
important that the transmission fluid be maintained at
the prescribed level using the recommended fluid. No
chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant may be used.
7
324
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
Front And Rear Wheel Bearings
Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed.
No regular maintenance is required for these components.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap, and tar.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
325
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
Special Care
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Use MOPAR威 Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
7
326
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only
MOPAR威 or equivalent is recommended. Do not use
oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
protective finish.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and MOPAR威 Carpet Cleaner for carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, or MOPAR威 Satin Select. Do not use harsh cleaners
or Armorall. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean to clean vinyl
upholstery.
MOPAR威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
327
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass; and therefore,
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
7
328
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild
soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
329
CAUTION!
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays.
• When installing the integrated power module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the integrated power
module and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
Integrated Power Module
7
330
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cartridge MiniFuse
Fuse
—
15 Amp
Blue
—
25 Amp
Neutral
—
25 Amp
Neutral
—
25 Amp
Neutral
—
—
—
25 Amp
Neutral
—
—
—
25 Amp
Neutral
—
—
30 Amp
—
Pink
Description
Cavity
Washer Motor
11
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Ignition Run/Start
12
EGR Solenoid/Alternator
14
15
—
Ignition Coils/Injectors
—
Starter
—
Windshield Wiper
13
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
50 Amp
Red
—
50 Amp
Red
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
MiniFuse
—
—
—
Description
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Valves
Radiator Fan Lo/High
—
—
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Pump Motor
—
Radiator Fan
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
331
Rear Power Distribution Center
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Rear Power Distribution Center
Access Panel
7
332
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
Cavity
6
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Green
—
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
—
7
—
1
2
3
4
5
MiniFuse
—
—
—
—
—
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
Integrated Power Module
(IPM)
—
Integrated Power Module
(IPM)
Heated Seats - if
equipped
Fuel Pump
Sub Amp - if equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
8
Cartridge MiniFuse
Fuse
—
15 Amp
Blue
9
—
10
11 *
12 *
13 *
14
—
—
—
—
—
15
16
—
—
20 Amp
Yellow
—
—
—
—
10 Amp
Red
—
—
Description
Cavity
Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC)/Wireless Control Module (WCM)/
Wireless Ignition Node
(WIN)
Power Outlet
17
—
—
—
—
AC Heater Control/
Cluster/Security Module
- if equipped
—
—
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Cartridge MiniFuse
Fuse
—
20 Amp
Yellow
—
20 Amp
Yellow
—
10 Amp
Red
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
10 Amp
Red
333
Description
Cluster
Selectable Power Outlet
Stop Lights
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
7
334
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
28
29
Cartridge MiniFuse
Fuse
—
10 Amp
Red
—
5 Amp
Orange
30
—
10 Amp
Red
31
32
33
34
35
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5 Amp
Orange
Description
Cavity
Ignition Run
36
Cluster/Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/STOP LIGHT
Switch
Door Modules/Power
Mirrors/Steering Control
Module (SCM)
—
—
—
—
Antenna Module - if
equipped/Power Mirrors
37
38
Cartridge MiniFuse
Fuse
—
20 Amp
Yellow
—
15 Amp
Blue
—
10 Amp
Red
39
—
10 Amp
Red
5 Amp
Orange
40
—
41
—
10 Amp
Red
42
30 Amp
Pink
—
Description
Hands-Free Phone - if
equipped//Radio
Transmission
Cargo Light/Vehicle Information Module - if
equipped
Heated Mirrors - if
equipped
Auto Inside Rearview
Mirror/Heated Seats - if
equipped/Switch Bank
AC Heater Control/
Headlights/Tire Pressure
Monitoring - if equipped
Front Blower Motor
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
43
44
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Blue
MiniFuse
—
—
Description
Rear Window Defroster
Amplifier - if equipped/
Sunroof - if equipped
* Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses
(circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an authorized dealer. The cluster and the driver seat switch are
fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 11. The
passenger seat switch is fused by the 25 Amp circuit
breaker in cavity 12. The door modules, the driver power
window switch, and the passenger power window
switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity
13. If you experience temporary or permanent loss of
these systems, see your authorized dealer for service.
335
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
7
336
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Overhead Console Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Visor Vanity Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220
Glove Box Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Door Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket /
Cupholder Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior
Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlight –
High Intensity Discharge (HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D1S
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
High Beam Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Park/Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157A
Front Fog Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145/H10
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Tail Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057K
Tail/Stop/Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057K
Rear Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Backup Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Center High-Mount Stop Light
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, and
Park/Turn Light — Models with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) Headlights
HID Headlights
The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
HEADLIGHT switch off and the key removed. Because
of this, you should not attempt to service a headlight
bulb yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
337
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlights when the HEADLIGHT switch is
turned ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or
electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlights,
when the headlights are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
7
338
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front/Rear Side Marker Light
Tail/Turn/Stop Light
1. Remove the front/rear side marker. Use a fiber stick or
similar tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side to
disengage the clip.
1. Open the trunk.
NOTE:
• If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is
placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
scratch the paint.
2. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove
the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Reinstall the front/rear side marker.
2. Using a screwdriver, remove the tail light retainer.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
339
3. Remove the fasteners from the back of the tail light
assembly.
7. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
4. Pull back the trunk liner.
5. Remove the remaining fasteners from the back of the
tail light assembly.
6. Pull the tail light assembly clear from the vehicle to
access the bulbs.
8. Disconnect the electrical connector.
9. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the tail light assembly.
10. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
7
340
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
11. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
light assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
12. Reinstall the tail light assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk liner.
13. Close the trunk.
Center Tail/Backup Light
See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement.
Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lights that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
see your authorized dealer.
License Light
1. Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
1 — License Light Bulb
2 — Socket
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the light to the rear fascia, and then install the
screws.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
341
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil with Filter
6.1 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40)
Cooling System *
6.1 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula) or equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
19 Gallons
Metric
72 Liters
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
15 Quarts
14.4 Liters
7
342
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil (6.1L)
Oil Filter (6.1L)
Spark Plugs (6.1L)
Fuel Selection (6.1L)
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating
conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that
meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SM or SM/CF, and
meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10725. The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic engine oil, such as Mobil 1威
SAE 0W-40 or equivalent. For additional information, refer to the “Engine Oil
Selection” and “Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)” in the “Maintenance Procedures” section of this manual.
MOPAR威 05281090 or equivalent
PLZTR5A-13 (Gap.050 in [1.27 mm])
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or higher
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
343
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Rear Axle
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
MOPAR威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid + 4, MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
API GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 346
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . 348
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
346
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type,
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the Emission Control
System. These, and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emissions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
“Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 mi (805
km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 mi (10 000 km) or six months, whichever
comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If this
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Oil Change
Required” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4.
At Each Stop for Fuel
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Engine Oil” under
“Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
347 M
A
I
N
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or T
E
damage.
N
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals A
N
as required.
C
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir and brake E
Once a Month
master cylinder, and add as needed.
S
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct C
H
operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 348 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Required Maintenance Intervals
N
T
E
N
A
N Maintenance Items
C Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Rotate the tires.
If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions,
inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at
12,000 mi (20 000 km) or 12 months.
Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 mi (20 000 km) or 12 months.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot
seals, and replace if necessary.
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Miles
6,000
6,000
Kilometers
10 000
10 000
or Months
6
6
12,000
20 000
12
12,000
12,000
18,000
20 000
20 000
30 000
12
12
18
24,000
40 000
24
24,000
40 000
24
24,000
40 000
24
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
349 M
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Maintenance Items
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if
using your vehicle for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. †
Flush and replace the engine coolant.
Replace the spark plugs.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
Miles
30,000
Kilometers
50 000
or Months
30
48,000
80 000
48
60,000
100 000
60
90,000
102,000
102,000
120,000
150
170
170
200
90
60
102
120
000
000
000
000
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 350 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N
WARNING!
T
E
You can be badly injured working on or around a
N
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
A
N
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
C
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 356
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
䡵 MOPAR威Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Chrysler LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . 354
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
9
352
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
353
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized selling dealer. They know you and the vehicle
best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and
9
354
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
• Authorized dealership name
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.
Chrysler LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealership. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-4568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
355
date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer
to the contract documents, and contact the person listed
in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their sincere
efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.
9
356
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of Chrysler LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They will help keep
the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
357
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
• Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
9
358
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
• Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
359
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
9
360
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
362
INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232,234
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 235,238
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 316
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124,312
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 304
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,310
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309,310
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,309
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156,255
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51,53
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,55,70,152
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,53
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,53
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,156
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 315,316,341
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 235,238
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,236
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 18
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Audio Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
INDEX
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Automatic Transaxle
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223,322,323
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323,343
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . 226,227
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
363
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 25
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,307
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,69
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,320
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235,238
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321,343
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
10
364
INDEX
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,234
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,320
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 67
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336,337
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,336
Calibration, Compass . . . . . .
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . .
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon Monoxide Warning . .
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 274
. . 302
. . 316
. . 325
68,273
. . 276
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,191,192
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,59,60,62,64
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,62
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178,193
INDEX
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Converter, Catalytic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 316
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314,317
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
365
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 315,341,342
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142,328
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,205
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
10
366
INDEX
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Digital Video Disc (DVD) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . 331
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 126
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 151
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 159
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 298,346
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
INDEX
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314,342
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,273
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301,341,342
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302,341
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
367
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 54
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,273,313
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,313
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,310
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303,342
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
10
368
INDEX
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,119,152
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 342
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,154
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Front Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270,342
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
INDEX
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274,297
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,26,104,229,269
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
369
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . 78,191,192
Hard Drive (HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 120
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,124
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
10
370
INDEX
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 120
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 130
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149,150
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,14
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,216
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Kicker Sound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
INDEX
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,62
Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,336
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,116
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,55,70,152
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,236
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,234
371
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336,337
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,129
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119,120
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 244
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 151
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,154
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116,337
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,124
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,153
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
10
372
INDEX
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116,150
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121,129
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Low Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 158
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,129
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . 121
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,129
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336,337
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 158
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 156,264
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,119,152
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 150
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,277
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,62
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
INDEX
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 158,298
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,129
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
373
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299,356
MP3 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 270,342
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301,342
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
10
374
INDEX
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303,342
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302,341
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302,341
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,298
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . 357
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,191,192
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . 78,191,192
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 250
Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
INDEX
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 140
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310,343
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless
Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . .
Radio, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
257
316
175
191
375
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192,202
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191,192,195
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Rear Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Reception, Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
10
376
INDEX
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 201
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191,192,195
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,38,69
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,60,64
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,39
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
INDEX
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,156
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 315,342
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
377
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction
Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178,193
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220,223
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,53
Side Curtain (Window Airbag) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 207
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,119,152
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Sound System
Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Sound Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
10
378
INDEX
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304,342
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,214
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237,310
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207,335
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 46
System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 151,281
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
INDEX
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 250
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,254,358
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,251
379
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245,254
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . 278
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
10
380
INDEX
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220,223,322
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 130
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . 21
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 21
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,36
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119,152
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . 78,191
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,276,277
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207,335
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18
INDEX
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124,312
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122,123,312
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
381
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,139
Window Airbag (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,53
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,205
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122,123,312
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2008 Charger SRT8
2008
OWNER’ S MANUAL
81-226-0810
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Charger SRT8